Yamaha RX-V3079 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V3079

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

English

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

En 2

CONTENTS

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FEATURES 6

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

PREPARATIONS 18

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 47

Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 51

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

PLAYBACK 72

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD

/CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

En 3

Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . 103

Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

CONFIGURATIONS 120

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders

(DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 154

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 156

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

En 4

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

APPENDIX 164

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

En 5

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

 Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

 AM antenna  FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase.

 YPAO microphone  Microphone base

Pole

(RX-A3050 only)

*Using for angle/height measurement during YPAO.

 Power cable

*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region

of purchase.



CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)

 Easy Setup Guide

 Safety Brochure

Insert the batteries the right

way round.

Operating range of the remote control

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the RX-A3050 (U.S.A. model), unless

otherwise specified.

• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and

“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.

• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within

6 m (20 ft)

En 6

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

Speakers

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Audio/Video

Sequential operation of a TV,

AV receiver, and BD/DVD

player (HDMI Control)

. p.182

Supports 2- to 9-channel (plus rear presence)

speaker system and up to 2 subwoofer

connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic

spaces in various styles.

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

. p.51

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert halls

(CINEMA DSP)

. p.76

• Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

. p.80

• Bi-amp connections, channel

expansion (with external power-amp)

and multi-zone configurations to

enhance your system

. p.28

USB device

Network contents

Wide variety of supported content

•Bluetooth

. p.86

• iPod/iPhone

. p.87

•USB

. p.90

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.94

• Internet radio

. p.98

•AirPlay

. p.101

4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported

AV receiver (the unit)

Change the input source and favorite

settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.73

Audio

Control

Playback of Dolby Atmos contents

supported

. p.20

iPod/iPhone/

Bluetooth device

En 7

Full of useful functions!

❑ Connecting various devices (p.42)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.39)

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

❑ Various wireless connection methods

(p.63)

The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to

connect to your wireless router (access point) without a

network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct

enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

without router.

❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed

in front (p.78)

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to

place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in

the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the

5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).

❑ Operating external devices with the

supplied remote control (p.160)

You can operate external devices with the supplied

remote control by registering the remote control codes of

the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players).

❑ Low power consumption (p.153)

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit’s power consumption.

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

Wi-Fi or

Wireless Direct

Useful tips

I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for

video and non-HDMI for audio...

Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the

type of an audio input jack to be used for the

corresponding input source (p.119).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.138).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.143).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to get more bass sounds…

Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy

enhanced bass sounds (p.117).

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a

language from English, Japanese, French, German,

Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.49).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu

to update the unit’s firmware (p.159). If the unit is

connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed

on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.163).

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.

• Input settings (p.121)

• SCENE settings (p.123)

• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.127)

• Various function settings (p.130)

• Information view (such as audio signal and video

signal) (p.154)

• System settings (p.156)

En 8

The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment

of these desires for more than 20 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.

What is a sound field?

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard

directly but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the

walls or ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is

affected by the shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken

together are what give us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.

This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”.

Conceptual diagram of a concert hall’s sound field

Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit

CINEMA DSP/CINEMA DSP 3D

Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual

sound fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA

DSP” allows this data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide

variety of sound programs using CINEMA DSP.

By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source

such as movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of

that specific content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you

the sensation of actually being in that scene.)

In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses 3-dimensional sound field data that

includes the axis of height, generating an even more realistic sound field with a spatial

sense.

CINEMA DSP HD

“CINEMA DSP HD

” is Yamaha’s flagship 3D sound field playback technology that

takes full advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the

sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker output, it delivers more than

twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA

DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly natural

and powerful spatial sound field.

Capability for reproducing reflections

(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)

CINEMA DSP

CINEMA DSP HD

Level

CINEMA DSP 3D

Time

En 9

YPAO is Yamaha original automatic calibration system to optimizing your sound and

surround environment by using microphone measurement. It can be create ideal

listening environment for maximizing high sound quality contents playback by adjusting

various speakers setting and the sound field automatically.

YPAO-R.S.C.

In typical home, the sound

has problems such as a

blurred low-frequency range

or a smearing of the

acoustical sound image

caused by undesirable

sound reflection from the

walls or ceiling.

“YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections and produces

the acoustic perfection for your listening environment.

YPAO Volume

YPAO Volume automatically adjusts the high

and low frequency levels at any volume level so

that you hear natural sounds even at low

volume.

YPAO 3D measurement

The direction (angle) of front, surround and presence speakers,

and the height of presence speakers as seen from the listening

position is measured, and compensation is applied to maximize

the 3D sound field effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP.

High-resolution music enhancer

Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48

kHz content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening

of the musicality in the original content (p.118).

Before processing

After processing

High-quality video processing

From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played

back as a high-quality image (p.141).

• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing

• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection

• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source

You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement.

YPAO

Compensation

Time

Level

YPAO Volume OFF

YPAO Volume ON

FrequencyLow High

Level

High

Unrivaled audio and video quality

Frequency

Loudness

Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz

signal (such as a CD)

Frequency

Loudness

Playback bandwidth of a

88.2/96 kHz signal

En 10

Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp

expansion

To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power

amp expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a

Hi-Fi amp).

For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.28).

The best expandability in Yamaha

By connecting an external power amp, you can

enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP

- an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.

(Example)

Multi-zone function

The multi-zone function (

p.103

) allows you to play back different input sources in the room

where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).

(The following shows examples of use.)

Enjoying music using speakers in another room

While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can listen to music

through the speakers of a different room.

Enjoying videos using a TV in another room

(HDMI connection)

While enjoying multichannel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and

music being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room.

Expandable to meet diverse needs

External power amp

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(such as Zone2)

Living room (main zone)

Kitchen

(such as Zone4)

En 11

Useful applications

■ AV CONTROLLER

“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control

for your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control

the available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source.

Functions

• Power on/off and volume adjustment

• Input, scene and sound mode selection

• DSP Parameter adjustment

• Playback control (including music selection for some sources)

• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play.

■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)

“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with cable connections between

AV receiver and source devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides

you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and video/audio

device connections and selecting the speaker system.

Functions

• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices)

• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance with illustrations)

• Viewing owner’s manual

• For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play.

En 12

Front panel

1 MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.143)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.144)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.145)

• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.147)

• An iPod is being charged (p.87)

3 Front display

Displays information (p.14).

4 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.80).

6 INPUT knob

Selects an input source.

7 Front panel door

For protecting controls and jacks (p.13).

8 VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

ENTER

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

VIDEO

SCENE

123 4

RLAUDIO

HDMI IN

INFO

(

WPS

)

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

INPUT

MAIN ZONE

VOLUME

PURE DIRECT

(

CONNECT

)

4 5231

Opening the front panel door

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently

press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.

(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

En 13

■ Inside of the front panel door

9 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.115).

B DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.114).

C TONE/BALANCE key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.116).

Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 or

Zone3 (p.109).

D STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.79).

E PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.75).

F SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.73).

G MULTI ZONE keys

ZONE 2–4 Enables/disables the audio output to

each zone (p.108).

ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone that is controlled by

the keys and knobs on the front panel

(p.108).

H INFO (WPS) key

Selects the information displayed on the front display

(p.114).

Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push

button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.66).

I MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.82).

Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.110).

J FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.82).

K PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.83).

Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.110).

L TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.82).

M USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.90) or an iPod

(p.87).

N YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.51).

O PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.45).

ENTER

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

VIDEO

SCENE

123 4

RLAUDIO

HDMI IN

INFO

(

WPS

)

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

(

CONNECT

)

BE JL9ACD HIK0FG

MN O P

En 14

Front display (indicators)

1 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal.

2 ECO

Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.153).

3 Signal strength indicator

Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.63).

4 ZONE indicators

Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.108).

5 SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

6 Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.114).

7 MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

8 Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

9 VIRTUAL

Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual

Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.76) or the virtual surround

processing (p.78) is working.

0 Bluetooth indicator

Lights up when the unit is connecting to a

Bluetooth

device

(p.86).

A ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.80) is

working.

B CINEMA DSP indicator

(RX-A3050)

“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.76) is

working. “CINEMA DSP

” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD

is activated.

(RX-A2050)

“CINEMA DSP” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.76) is

working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D

is activated.

C STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

D PARTY

Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.109)

E Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

F ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.116) is working.

G Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

K Surround back speaker

B Front presence speaker (L)

N Front presence speaker (R)

M Rear presence speaker (L)

< Rear presence speaker (R)

C Subwoofer (1)

V Subwoofer (2)

OUT

213

VOLUME

MUTE

ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL

ZONE

ECO

234

SBLRPL SBRSB RPR

SW1

SW2

FPL

CL R

FPR

ENHANCER

PARTY

STEREO TUNED

SLEEP

ZONE ZONE

B EGE

52 3

B0 DAC

(RX-A3050 U.S.A. model)

En 15

Rear panel

1 PHONO jacks

For connecting to a turntable (p.44).

2 AUDIO 1–3 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.44).

3 AV 1–4 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.42).

4 HDMI OUT 1 jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.39). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.41), or for connecting to an

HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.106).

5 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(component/composite video) jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component or

composite video and outputting video signals (p.40) or for

connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3

(p.105).

6 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.42).

7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks

For connecting to video playback devices that support

component video and inputting video signals (p.43).

8 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to devices that support the trigger function

(p.48).

9 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.107).

0 NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.47).

A Wireless antenna

For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.63).

B RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.

Consult your dealer for details.

C VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p.48).

D AC IN jack

For connecting the supplied power cable (p.48).

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

L R

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP

EXTRA SP1

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

WIRELESS

(HDCP2.2)

1 4 @5 D9 BA7 862

* The area around the video/audio output

jacks is marked in white on the actual

product to prevent improper connections.

(RX-A3050 U.S.A. model)

En 16

E ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.46).

F ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3050)

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or

Zone3 and outputting audio (p.105), or for connecting to an

external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence

channels (p.37).

ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2050)

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or

Zone3 and outputting audio (p.105).

G SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.19).

H PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.26) or

to an external power amplifier (p.37).

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

L R

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP

EXTRA SP1

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

WIRELESS

(HDCP2.2)

GE HF

* The area around the video/audio output

jacks is marked in white on the actual

product to prevent improper connections.

(RX-A3050 U.S.A. model)

En 17

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 SOURCE z key

Turns on/off an external device.

SOURCE key

Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.161).

This key lights up in green after pressed.

RECEIVER key

Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.161). This key

lights up in orange after pressed.

RECEIVER z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks

PHONO PHONO jacks

TUNER FM/AM radio

BLUETOOTH

Bluetooth

connection

(the unit as a

Bluetooth

receiver)

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select

a desired network source)

4 ZONE switch

Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control

(p.108).

5 SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.73).

6 PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program (p.75).

7 External device operation keys

Select menus for external devices (p.161).

8 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

9 Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.89).

A Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the

input source (p.81).

BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.

PRESET Select a preset station.

TUNING Select the radio frequency.

External device operation keys

Let you play back and perform other operations for external

devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is

selected (p.161).

B Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.75).

C INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.114).

D SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).

E Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.82).

F TV operation keys

Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV

operations (p.160).

G HDMI OUT key

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.72).

H PA RT Y k e y

Turns on/off the party mode (p.109).

I VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

J MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

K OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.115).

L DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.114).

M CODE SET key

Registers remote control codes of external devices on the

remote control (p.160).

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.160).

ENT

MEMORY

6 87

123 4

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

2 3 4

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

123 4

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

En 18

PREPARATIONS

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

General setup procedure

1 Connecting speakers (p.19)

Basic speaker configuration (p.20)

Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.

Advanced speaker configuration (p.28)

Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone

configurations to enhance the system.

2 Connecting a TV (p.39)

Connect a TV to the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices (p.42)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.46)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Connecting a network cable or preparing

the wireless antenna (p.47)

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for

establishing a wireless network connection.

6 Connecting other devices (p.48)

Connect external devices such as devices compatible with the trigger function.

7 Connecting the power cable (p.48)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.49)

Select the desired on-screen menu language.

Configuring the necessary speaker settings (p.50)

According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings manually before

performing YPAO.

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically (YPAO) (p.51)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.63)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection.

En 19

The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.28).

Functions of each speaker

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the

speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker

settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”

and “SBR” in the diagram).

• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to

produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we

recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and

rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).

• (RX-A3050 only)

The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to

produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear

presence speakers.

Ideal speaker layout

1 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.26).

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L) 1

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Front (R) 2

Center 3

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and

vocals).

Surround (L) 4 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers

also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround

back speakers are connected.

Surround (R) 5

Surround back (L) 6

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Surround back (R) 7

Front presence (L) E

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA

DSP HD

(RX-A3050) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2050) (p.76), the

presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in

your room.

Front presence (R) R

Rear presence (L) T

Rear presence (R) Y

Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and

reinforces bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the

unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.

T Y

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

10°~30°10°~30°

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 20

Basic speaker configuration

■ Placing speakers in your room

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

• To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark.

• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead

speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence

speaker layout” (p.24).

❑ 9.2+2-channel system [★5.1.4]

(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy

a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected sound program (p.76).

• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby

Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)”

setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.50).

• (RX-A3050 only)

By using an external power amplifier (p.29), you can make an 11-channel system [★7.1.4] and enjoy Dolby

Atmos contents with the front presence and rear presence speakers.

❑ 9.2-channel system [★5.1.4]

(using rear presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a

highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back

Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound

field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel

contents.

• When using front presence and rear presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby

Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence/Rear Presence)”

setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.50).

6 7

T Y

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 21

❑ 9.2-channel system [★7.1.2] (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds

using the surround back speakers.

• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as

the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before

performing YPAO (p.50).

• (RX-A3050 only)

This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround

speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This

system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as

the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before

performing YPAO (p.50).

• (RX-A3050 only)

This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround

speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 22

❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,

center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows

you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

❑ 5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual

Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to

the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for

7.1-channel contents.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 23

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)

Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual

surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual

CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (

p.136

) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.

• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front

speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• When using front presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as

the presence speakers, configure the “Layout (Front Presence)” setting in the “Setup” menu before

performing YPAO (p.50).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 24

❑ 2.1-channel system

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround

speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound

(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

❑ Presence speaker layout

The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height/Rear

Height, Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your

listening environment.

• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP HD

/Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern.

• You can configure the placement patterns for front presence and rear presence speakers separately.

Front Height/Rear Height

Install the presence speakers on the front/rear side wall.

It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom

sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.

Overhead

Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.

It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of

front and rear sound spaces effectively.

• For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers”

(p.25).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 25

Dolby Enabled SP

Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.

It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from

speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.

• Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled

speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the

Dolby Enabled speakers.

Notes on installation of ceiling speakers

When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, use the following illustration as a

reference.

When using two presence speakers When using four presence speakers

Installation position

Just above the listening position, or the

ceiling between extensions of front

speakers and listening position

Installation position

Front presence speakers:

the ceiling between the extensions of the

front speakers and listening position

Rear presence speakers:

the ceiling between the extensions of the

listening position and surround (or

surround back) speakers

Caution

• Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified

contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.

SBR

SBL

SRFPR

FPL

SBR

SBL

SRRPR

RPL

FPR

FPL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 26

■ Setting the speaker impedance

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a

6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case,

you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

MAIN ZONE z.

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

■ Connecting speakers

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Speakers to be connected

If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear

presence speakers (*2). If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back

speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). If you have five speakers, use two of

them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers (*6).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,

configure the “Layout (Subwoofer)” setting (p.136) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to

an AC wall outlet.

• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an

external power amplifier” (p.37).

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

SBLRPL SBRSB RPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

8¬MIN

SPEAKER IMP.

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the

speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Room Speaker type Abbr.

Speaker system

(the number of channels)

Power Amp

Assign

(p.133)

9+2 9 7 5 2

Main zone

Front (L) 1 ●●●●●

Basic (default)

Front (R) 2 ●●●●●

Center 3 ●●●●

Surround (L) 4 ●●●*5

Surround (R) 5 ●●●*5

Surround back (L) 6 ● *1 *3

Surround back (R) 7 ● *1 *3

Front presence (L) E ●●*4 *6

Front presence (R) R ●●*4 *6

Rear presence (L) T ● *2

Rear presence (R) Y ● *2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 27

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

Connection diagram

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

❑ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the

unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire

to the positive terminal.

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and

twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the

terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and General models only)

a Tighten the speaker terminal.

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

–

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L R

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP

EXTRA SP1

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

6 7

The unit (rear)

FRONT

+ (red)

– (black)

FRONT

Banana plug

(

SINGLE

)

PRE OUT

CENTER

SUR. BACKSURRUND

SURROUND BACK

(

REAR

)

SUBWOOFER

(

FRONT

)

Audio pin cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 28

Advanced speaker configuration

In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.20), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal

amplifiers for front speakers to

have more high-quality sounds

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Bi-amp

connection

Combining with an external

power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier,

multichannel amplifier, etc.) to

build an extended system

Using the excess internal

amplifiers for stereo speakers

in another room

External power

amplifier

Main zone

Zone2

Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 29

■ Available speaker configurations

(RX-A3050)

(RX-A2050)

• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the

“Setup” menu (p.50).

• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the

EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to

the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks. The following explanation is based

on the assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.

Speaker configuration

Main zone

Multi-zone Power Amp Assign (p.133) Page

Output channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External power

amplifier (required)

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone 7  7ch BI-AMP 30

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers 7  +1 room 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE 30

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and power-amp channel

expansion (for presence channels)

11 

Front presence

Rear presence

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP 31

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front and/or presence

channels)

11 Rear Presence 9ch +RP 31

11 Front 9ch +FRONT 32

Front presence

Rear presence

7ch +FP+RP 32

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and

multi-zone speakers

9 Front +1 room 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE 33

7 Front +2 rooms 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE 33

Using multi-zone speakers

7 +1 room 7ch +1ZONE 34

9 +1 room 9ch +1ZONE 34

7 +2 rooms 7ch +2ZONE 35

Speaker configuration

Main zone

Multi-zone Power Amp Assign (p.133) Page

Output channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External power

amplifier (required)

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone 7  7ch BI-AMP 30

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers 7  +1 room 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE 30

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and

multi-zone speakers

9 Front +1 room 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE 33

7 Front +2 rooms 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE 33

Using multi-zone speakers

7 +1 room 7ch +1ZONE 34

9 +1 room 9ch +1ZONE 34

7 +2 rooms 7ch +2ZONE 35

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 30

❑ 7ch BI-AMP ❑ 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE

Bi-amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Bi-amp

Main zone

Zone3

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.108), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 31

❑ 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (RX-A3050 only) ❑ 9ch +RP (RX-A3050 only)

6 7

Bi-amp

via external amp

via

external amp

via

external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting

external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.105).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

6 7

via

external amp

via

external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an

external amplifier for Zone3 (p.105).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 32

❑ 9ch +FRONT (RX-A3050 only) ❑ 7ch +FP+RP (RX-A3050 only)

6 7

via external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an

external amplifier for Zone3 (p.105).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY EXTRA SP 2

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

6 7

via external amp

via

external amp

via

external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting

external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.105).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 33

❑ 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE ❑ 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

via external amp

Main zone

Zone3

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Zone2

Zone3

Main zone

via external amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 34

❑ 7ch +1ZONE ❑ 9ch +1ZONE

Main zone

Zone2

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1

Main zone

Zone3

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.108), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 35

❑ 7ch +2ZONE

Zone2

Zone3

Main zone

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.108), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 36

■

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the

FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup”

menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.50).

• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals output the same signals.

■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers

When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals.

To utilize the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp

Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall

outlet (p.50).

• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign”

(p.133) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is

assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks.

• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.105).

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp

connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker

cables.

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP

EXTRA SP1

SINGLE

EXTRA SP2

The unit (rear)

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L R

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP

EXTRA SP1

SINGLE

EXTRA SP2

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

Zone3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 37

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the

input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel

signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

1 F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3050 only)

Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power

Amp Assign” setting (p.133).

2 R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3050 only)

Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power

Amp Assign” setting (p.133).

3 FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

4 SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

5 SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect

the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

6 CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

(Example)

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

About external power amplifiers

We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

• With unbalanced inputs

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 )

Caution

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of

the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to

the pre-main amplifier.

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

)

COAXIAL

AC IN

NNA

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

L R

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP

EXTRA SP1

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

WIRELESS

(HDCP2.2)

321 4 56

The unit (rear)

HDMI

AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

ENCE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

L R

ZONE

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

R OUT/

OUT

WIRELESS

MAIN IN

FRONT

The unit (rear)

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

Main input jack

Amplifier with

volume control

bypass

(such as A-S3000)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 38

■ Video/audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission

features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.

■ Video jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B),

and chrominance red (P

R). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

❑ VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable (RCA cable).

Input/output jacks and cables

AV 1

HDMI cable

AV 1

Component video cable

AV 1

Video pin cable

Digital optical cable

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

En 39

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI

cable.

■ HDMI connection

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.41).

• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:

– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)

– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box

• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control.

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For

details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.182).

2 Connecting a TV

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SURROUND

FRONT

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI OUT

(HDCP2.2)

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

HDMI

The unit

(rear)

HDMI OUT jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a

single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 40

■ Component/composite video connection

When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to

the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable

connection between the TV and the unit.

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2

)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

ONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SURROUN

SURROUND

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(

B PR

PRPB

AV 1

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

OPTICAL

AUDIO

OPTICAL

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

PB PR

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

Video input

(component video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SURROUND

FRONT

AV 1

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack

Video input (composite video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 41

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.72).

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video

monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor

(p.106).

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SURROUND

FRONT

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI OUT

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

The unit

(rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

Projector

TV (already connected)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 42

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

• Connecting an iPod (p.87)

• Connecting a USB storage device (p.90)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than

HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.180).

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.150) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),

COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.119) in the “Option” menu.

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices

OUT

ARC

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SPEAKERS

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

L R

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

P2.2)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 43

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the

unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SPEAKER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.P

L R

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP

TRIG

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

YPB PR

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–3

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DV

AV 1

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE O

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENC

(HDCP2.2)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

C C

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4 (VIDEO)

jacks

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 44

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.150) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL

(a, b, f) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.119) in the “Option” menu.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3 or PHONO on the remote

control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)

AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO)

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

When connecting a turntable

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a

low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SURROUND

FRONT

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

PHONO

GND

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3

(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

The unit

(rear)

Audio device

PHONO jacks

Audio output

(PHONO)

Turntable

Ground lead

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 45

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see

“Connecting an iPod” (p.87) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.90).

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on

the unit.

❑ HDMI connection

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the

unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the

video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT

jack of the unit (p.39).

• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.

• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.

❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection

Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a

video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from the unit.

• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO)

jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO AUX

ZONE

CONTROL

VIDEO

RLAUDIO

HDMI IN

HDMI

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

VIDEO

RL AUDIO

HDMI IN

V RL

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 46

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

Assembling the AM antenna

Connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

L R

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

FM antenna

AM antenna

The unit (rear)

Hold down Insert Release

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 47

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

Connecting the network cable

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set

“Network Connection” (p.144) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.145).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Network” (p.155) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Preparing the wireless antenna

If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up

straight.

For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see

“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.63).

• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna

AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

WIRELESS

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

Mobile device

(such as iPod touch

and iPhone)

WIRELESS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 48

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks

with a monaural mini-plug cable.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.151) in the

“Setup” menu.

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit

and then to an AC wall outlet.

6 Connecting other devices

AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

SINGLE

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

UR. BACK

(

SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

RPB

YPRPB

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

WIRELESS

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT

1–2 jacks

System

connector

jack

Yamaha

subwoofer

Power amplifier

(such as MX-A5000)

Trigger In

(+12V)

7 Connecting the power cable

Before connecting the power cable (General model only)

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.

Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a

potential fire hazard.

AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

ERS

CENTER FRONT

R.PRESENCE

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP

EXTRA SP1

SP2

RS-232C

GGER

OUT

.1A

TAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

WIRELESS

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V-

240V

110V-

120V

The unit (rear)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

OUT

OTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

R L

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP

EXTRA SP1

RS-232C

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

WIRELESS

To an AC wall outlet

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 49

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,

Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit.

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and

the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired

language.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

RECEIVER z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Cursor keys

En 50

If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the

procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings

manually before performing YPAO.

• Advanced speaker configuration (p.28)

• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual

CINEMA FRONT) (p.23)

• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.24)

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker”

and then “Manual Setup”.

Configure the corresponding speaker settings.

When using any of advanced speaker configurations

a Use the cursor keys to select “Power Amp Assign” (p.133) and

press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your speaker system and

press ENTER.

When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel

system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 

“Layout”  “Surround” (p.134).

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER.

When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos

playback

a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 

“Layout”  “Front Presence” (p.135).

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence

speaker layout and press ENTER.

c If you are using the rear presence speakers, also select its

layout in “Rear Presence”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

RECEIVER z

Cursor keys

En 51

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.

– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.

– Keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not

become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.

– Do not connect headphones.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit.

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening

position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the

front panel.

• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your

ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can

use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

YPAO MIC

The unit (front)

YPAO

microphone

Ear height

YPAO MIC

jack

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

UNIN

PRE

BAN

ENTER

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

LUME

P-UP

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

AUDI

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

INPUT

MUT

ODE SET

RETURN

RECEIVER z

En 52

The following screen appears on the TV.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

If desired, select the measuring options.

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.53) or

“Angle/Height” (p.54) (RX-A3050 only) and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate

external devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor

keys.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

measurement.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.57)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.54)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

V V

ENTER

RECEIVER

Cursor keys

En 53

❑ Multi Position

Selects multi measure or single measure.

Settings

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in

a wider space.

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be

seated most frequently.

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you

want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up

to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be

optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the

measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be

optimized to suit that position (single measure).

a b

bac

Multi measure

(5 listening positions)

Multi measure

(2 listening positions + front/back)

Multi measure

(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)

Single measure

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 54

❑ Angle/Height

(RX-A3050 only)

Enables/disables the angle/height measurement.

Settings

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for

measurement. It takes about 5 minutes to perform the

measurement.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.61) or “Warning messages” (p.62).

• (RX-A3050 only)

Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the

TV.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

(RX-A2050)

(RX-A3050 [when angle/height measurement is disabled])

Proceed to Step 3.

Yes

Enables the angle/height measurement. The unit will

measure angle of each speaker and height of the

presence speakers at the listening position, and correct

the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create

more effective sound fields.

No (default) Disables the angle/height measurement.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 55

(RX-A3050 [when angle/height measurement is enabled])

Proceed to Step 2.

Perform the angle/height measurement.

a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.

b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.

c Place the microphone base at the listening position and set the

YPAO microphone to the position “1”.

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.

Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.

• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement

finishes.

d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle

measurement finishes.

e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the

positions “2” and “3”.

Microphone base

Pole

Microphone base

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 56

f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the

fourth angle measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle

measurement finishes.

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.60).

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”

to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are

automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy

natural sounds even at low volume.

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.116) in the

“Option” menu.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 57

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for

measurement. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening

positions.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.61) or “Warning messages” (p.62).

• (RX-A3050 only)

Do not use the microphone base until the corresponding message appear on the

TV.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions

(up to 8) have been taken.

When the measurements at the positions you want

to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to

select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening

positions, the following screen appears automatically.

(RX-A2050)

(RX-A3050 [when angle/height measurement is disabled])

Proceed to Step 5.

(RX-A3050 [when angle/height measurement is enabled])

Proceed to Step 4.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 58

Perform the angle/height measurement.

a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle/height measurement.

b Attach the supplied pole to the center of the microphone base.

c Place the microphone base at the listening position you will be

seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the

position “1”.

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.

Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.

• Do not move the microphone base until the fourth angle measurement

finishes.

d Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle

measurement finishes.

e In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the

positions “2” and “3”.

f Set the YPAO microphone at the top of the pole and perform the

fourth angle measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the fourth angle

measurement finishes.

Microphone base

Pole

Microphone base

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 59

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.60).

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”

to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are

automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy

natural sounds even at low volume.

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.116) in the

“Option” menu.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 60

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Result” and press ENTER.

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu,

which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.

1 Measurement result items

2 Measurement result details

3 The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed)

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto

Setup”, and then “Result” (p.129).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload‘” and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

Angle

(Horizontal)

(RX-A3050 only)

Horizontal angle of each speaker at the listening position

Height

(RX-A3050 only)

Height of the presence speakers above the level of the

listening position

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 61

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again.

E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact

the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-11: No R.PRNS SP One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 62

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity

(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.60) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

“Reverse”.

If the speaker is connected incorrectly:

Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

If the speaker is connected correctly:

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening

position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.60) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m

(80 ft) of the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the

speakers.

Select “Level” in “Result” (p.60) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage

environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend

using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 63

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a

wireless connection.

Selecting the connection method

Select a connection method according to your network environment.

■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).

You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

on the unit.

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.64).

• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection

(p.47) or Wireless Direct (p.70).

• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless

router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.

■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)

Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.

You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the

unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

(Wireless Direct)” (p.70).

• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.47) or the

wireless network connection (p.64).

• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Internet radio

–Network services

– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.

11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly

The unit

Wireless router

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

Internet

Modem

The unit

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 64

Connecting the unit to a wireless network

There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless

network.

Select a connection method according to your environment.

■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting

You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the

connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).

Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a

wireless router.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

Yes

Do you own iOS devices

(iPhone/iPod touch)?

Yes

A (p.64)

B (p.66)

Does your wireless router

(access point) have a WPS

button?

C (p.67)

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RECEIVER z

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 65

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the

desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

The following connection methods are available.

❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly

If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform

the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The

following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)

On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay

speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.

Check the network currently selected and tap

“Next”.

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically

connected to the selected network (access point).

Wireless (WAC)

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device

to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see

“Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”.

(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)

USB Cable

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device

to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing

the iOS device setting using a USB cable”.

(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)

The name of the unit

Tap here to start setup

The network currently selected

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 66

❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable

If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the

procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.

Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable

the screen lock on the iOS device.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and

press ENTER.

Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS

device.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ B: Using the WPS push button

configuration

You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the

WPS button.

• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router

(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3

seconds.

“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front

display.

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access

point).

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the front display.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO AUX

ZONE

CONTROL

VIDEO

RLAUDIO

The unit (front)

About WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,

which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RECEIVER z

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 67

■ C: Using other connection methods

If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push

button configuration method, follow the procedure below to

configure the wireless network settings.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the

desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

The following connection methods are available.

WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS

button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the

instructions displayed on the TV screen.

Share Wi-Fi

Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.64).

Access Point

Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by searching

for an access point. For details on settings, see

“Searching for an access point” (p.68).

Manual Setting

You can set up a wireless connection by entering

the required information (such as SSID)

manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up

the wireless connection manually” (p.68).

PIN Code

You can set up a wireless connection by entering

the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access

point). The method is available if the wireless

router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code

method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN

code” (p.69).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RECEIVER z

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 68

❑ Searching for an access point

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the

unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of

available access points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the

desired access point and select “NEXT”.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the

wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method

and security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of

the access point and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the

security method of the access point and select

“NEXT”.

Settings

None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 69

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.

Proceed to Step 4.

If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or

10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.

If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character

string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is

entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Using the PIN code

If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of

available access points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the

desired access point and select “NEXT”.

The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router

(access point).

For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the

wireless router (access point).

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 70

Connecting a mobile device to the unit

directly (Wireless Direct)

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit

directly.

• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not

strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless

devices connected to the unit without permission.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the

desired security method and select “NEXT”.

Settings

None, WPA2-PSK (AES)

• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the

communication is not encrypted.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RECEIVER z

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 71

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.

Proceed to Step 10.

Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64

hexadecimal digits.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press

ENTER to save the setting.

The settings made appear on the TV screen.

The SSID and security key information is required for setup

of a mobile device.

Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the

instruction manual of the mobile device.

a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.

b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available

access points.

c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key

displayed in Step 10.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 72

PLAYBACK

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.81)

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.86)

• Playing back iPod music (p.87)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.90)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.94)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.98)

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.101)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or

TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.116).

On-screen input selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and

press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output changes.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.73).

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest

resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p

TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.149), you can turn on/off

each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Basic playback procedure

OUT 1+2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

OUT 2

Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

VOLUME

SBL SBR

SW1

SL SR

CL R

¡¡¡OUT¡1+2

HDMI¡OUT¡Sel.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

MAIN

R. DE

SOU

EIVE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

VOLUME

MUTE

HDMI OUT

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

En 73

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.

You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.

Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes

from the “Scene” menu (p.123).

On-screen scene selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press

ENTER.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SCENE (SCENE key)

Input

Input (p.72) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER

Audio Select (p.119) Auto Auto — —

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.72) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2

Mode

DSP Program (p.75) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 9ch Stereo 9ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.139) Auto Auto Auto Auto

Enhancer (p.80) Off On On On

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.118) On On On On

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ON SCREEN

ENTER

SCENE

Cursor keys

En 74

Configuring scene assignments

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source

and sound program) that you want to assign to a

scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

If you want to control the corresponding playback

device after selecting the scene, hold down the

corresponding SCENE key and input selection key

together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see

“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.161) to register it.

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify

the device type in “Device Control” (p.124) in the “Scene” menu.

Selecting setting items to be included as

scene assignments

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output

and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the

scene assignments in “Detail” (p.124) in the “Scene” menu.

SBL SBR

SW1

SL SR

CL R

¡Set¡Complete

¡¡¡¡SCENE1

Sound

Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,

Extra Bass

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue

Level, Subwoofer Trim

Video Video Mode, Video Adjustment

Volume Master Volume

Lipsync Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

R. DE

EIVE

SCENE

SOURCE

Input selection keys

En 75

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.76).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or

stereo playback

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

music sources or stereo playback (p.77).

❑ Selecting a surround decoder

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

2-channel sources (p.79).

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode

• Press STRAIGHT.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels

(p.79).

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode

• Press PURE DIRECT.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the

electrical noise from other circuitry (p.80).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer

• Press ENHANCER.

This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth

and breadth (p.80).

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the “DSP Program” menu (p.126).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.14) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

the “Information” menu (p.154).

Selecting the sound mode

About Dolby Atmos

• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or

multichannel PCM format in the following situations.

– Any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected.

– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.

– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).

• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such

as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.78), YPAO Volume (p.116) or Compressed

Music Enhancer (p.80) does not work.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

NIN

PRE

BAND

PTI

P MEN

P-

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

MOVIE

MUSIC

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

ON SCREEN

ENTER

PROGRAM

Cursor keys

En 76

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields

(CINEMA DSP HD

/CINEMA DSP 3D)

* CINEMA DSP HD

: RX-A3050, CINEMA DSP 3D: RX-A2050

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP

technology (CINEMA DSP HD

/CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound

fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural

stereoscopic sound fields.

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.140) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.

• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to

produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we

recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and

rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).

• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,

the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of

depth to the rear sound field.

• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

• (RX-A3050 only)

The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to

produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear

presence speakers.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

VIRTUAL

SW1

SL SR

FPL

CLR

FPR

¡¡MUSIC

Hall¡in¡Vienna

¡¡CLASSICAL

“CINEMA DSP !” (RX-A3050) or “CINEMA DSP n” (RX-A2050) lights up

Sound program category

Sound program

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically

created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue,

sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of

the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and

background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge

on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long

periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

En 77

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer

for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound

field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound

field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and

emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations

of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the

acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround

sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are

used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be

fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.

Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a

pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the

high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial

reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself

reproduces the atmosphere of the church.

Church in

Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)

of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the

outskirts of Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

En 78

❑ LIVE/CLUB

❑ STEREO

• CINEMA DSP HD

/CINEMA DSP 3D (p.76) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.78) do not work when “2ch

Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no

surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround

technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the

well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using

presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front

(Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your

room, you can place them in the front (p.23) and enjoy multichannel surround sound

using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.

When “Layout (Surround)” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates

the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel

surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with

stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting

a sound program or a surround decoder.

Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low

ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in

the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the

concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that

make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

9ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

En 79

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround

back speakers are used, select a surround decoder (p.79).

• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.136) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual

CINEMA FRONT (p.78) works when multichannel source is played back.

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources.

• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system

and the selected decode type (p.127).

• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.175).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

VOLUME

SBL SBR

SW1

SL SR

CL R

¡¡¡STRAIGHT

bSurround

Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all

sources. A real acoustic space (including

overhead) will be created especially when

object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content)

is played.

bPLIIx Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will

be output from the surround/surround back

speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

bPLII Movie

bPLIIx Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will

be output from the surround/surround back

speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

bPLII Music

bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will

be output from the surround/surround back

speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

bPLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix

decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be

output from the surround/surround back speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix

decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output

from the surround/surround back speakers.

VOLUME

SBL SBR

SW1

SL SR

CL R

¡†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE

¡SUR.¡DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

STRAIGHT

SUR.DECODE

En 80

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” (p.135) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“None”.

• When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing

(such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.78), YPAO Volume (p.116) or

Compressed Music Enhancer (p.80) does not work.

• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back

speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except

when a Dolby Atmos content is played).

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu

– Using the multi-zone function

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of

uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)

when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.118) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”

(default).

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling

rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.118) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1 SW2SW

FPL

L R

FPR

¡PURE DIRECT

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

ENHANCER

¡Enhancer On

“ENHANCER” lights up

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

NIN

PRE

BAND

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

PURE DIRECT

ENHANCER

En 81

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered

radio stations.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The

explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.

Setting the frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM.

Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10

kHz for AM.

Set the unit to standby mode.

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,

press MAIN ZONE z.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”.

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

Listening to FM/AM radio

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

En 82

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM

radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.119) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it.

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using

“Auto Preset” (p.85).

■ Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.82)

to tune into the desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a

preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CLR

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM87.50MHz

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

STEREO TUNED

¡ FM 98.50MHz

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

STEREO TUNED

¡ Preset OK

01:FM 98.50MHz

¡Preset

Preset number

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

STEREO TUNED

¡ FM 98.50MHz

02:Empty

¡Preset

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENHAN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

MEMORY

TUNING

PRESET

BAND

TUNER

Numeric keys

En 83

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.85).

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of

Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program

Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio

Data System broadcasting station.

■

Displaying the Radio Data System information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.85).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

STEREO TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

¡Preset

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

STEREO TUNED

¡Program Type

Info

Item name

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

STEREO TUNED

CLASSICS

FM 98.50MHz

Information

Frequency (always displayed)

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

INFO

PRESET

TUNER

Numeric keys

En 84

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

■ Receiving traffic information

automatically

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Current program type

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

STEREO TUNED

TP FM101.30MHz

TrafficProgram

Finished

Traffic information station (frequency)

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 85

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the

TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.83), the

Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”

“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

2 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto

Preset”.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the background.

Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 86

You can play back music files stored on a

Bluetooth

device (such

as smartphones) on the unit.

• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.147) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file

formats” (p.179).

Playing back

Bluetooth

device music on the

unit

Follow the procedure below to establish a

Bluetooth

connection

between a

Bluetooth

device (such as smartphones) and the unit,

and play back music stored the

Bluetooth

device on the unit.

• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.

Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the

input source.

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network

name of the unit) from the available device list.

A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will

be made.

If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start

playback.

The playback screen (artist name, album name and song

title) is displayed on the TV.

• “Not found” appears when no Bluetooth devices are detected.

• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit

automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish

another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth

connection.

• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following

operations.

– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.

– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.

– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.131) in the “Setup” menu.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

Playing back music via Bluetooth

The unit

Bluetooth device

(such as smartphones)

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

BLUETOOTH

External device

operation keys

En 87

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod.

• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).

• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay

(p.101).

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is

charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu is

set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playing back iPod music

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

The unit (front)

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

Connected

USB

En 88

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.89).

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.89) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

RETURN

USB

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 89

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.89) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control

playback.

■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself to start playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.

“v” appears in the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

REE

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

MODE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 90

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format).

• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired

network connection.

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...”

appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

PROGRAM

(

CONNECT

)

The unit (front)

USB storage device

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

Connected

USB

En 91

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly

by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.110).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

RETURN

USB

Cursor keys

En 92

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.93) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys

(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.93) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the

remote control to control playback.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 93

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 94

You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.47). You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”

(p.155) in the “Information” menu.

• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired

network connection.

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to

configure the media sharing setting on each music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed

❑ For Windows Media Player 12

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.

Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.

Click “Turn on media streaming”.

Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model

name.

Click “OK” to exit.

❑ For Windows Media Player 11

Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.

Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click

“Allow”.

Click “OK” to exit.

• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software

installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media

sharing settings.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

En 95

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly

by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.110).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

SOU

EIVE

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

En 96

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.97) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.97) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control

playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.122).

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 97

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 98

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

SOU

EIVE

ENTER

RETURN

NET

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.47). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.155) in the “Information” menu.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

Playback of Internet radio

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by

selecting the shortcut numbers (p.110).

Listening to Internet radio

Cursor keys

En 99

■ Browse screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop

playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Menu Function

Bookmark On

(Bookmark Off)

Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from

the “Bookmarks” folder (p.100).

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Function

Bookmark On

Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder

(p.100).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 100

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)

By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,

you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the

browse screen.

■ Registering the station on the

browse/playback screen

Select the desired Internet radio station in the

browse screen or start playback of it to display the

playback screen.

Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”

and press ENTER.

The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.

• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the

“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.

■ Registering the station on the vTuner

website

Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.

This operation is necessary to register the radio station for

the first time.

Check the vTuner ID of the unit.

You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.155) in the

“Information” menu.

Access the vTuner website

(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on

your PC and enter the vTuner ID.

• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your

account using your e-mail address.

Click the “Add” icon (

❤

+) next to the station name.

• To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in

the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (

❤

–) next to the station

name.

You can switch the language.

Enter the vTuner ID in this area.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 101

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”

(p.155) in the “Information” menu.

• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to

connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.179).

• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay password (p.113).

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback

screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit

(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

Playing back music with AirPlay

iTunes

iPhone/iPad/

iPod touch

Router

(wired or wireless)

The unit

(wired or wireless)

iTunes (example) iPod iOS6 (example)iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

En 102

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting “Network Standby” (p.145) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.146) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable

volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.122) in the “Input”

menu to “Off”.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the

remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers

in advance.

Caution

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

Menu Function

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 103

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room

where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person

can listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the

guest room (Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).

Multi-zone configuration examples

■ Enjoying music in other rooms

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.

Connections

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.36

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.105

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in

each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.181).

• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that

you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone

connections that best meet your requirements.

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2 and/or Zone3)

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

En 104

■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms

You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

Connections

TV (for analog video playback): p.105

TV (for digital video playback): p.106

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.36

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.105

❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Connection

TV: p.106

Preparing the multi zone system

Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method

varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).

❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For

details, see “Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.36).

Living room (main zone)

Guest room

(Zone2 or Zone3)

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI)

Living room (main zone)

Kitchen

(Zone2 or Zone4)

Video/audio (HDMI)

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external

amplifier.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

En 105

❑ Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin

cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.

• (RX-A3050 only)

You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front

presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.133) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an

external amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence

channel audio.

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos

Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or Zone3. Depending on the

video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection

methods.

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for multi-zone video output. To watch

videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to

the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD

player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor for Zone2 or

Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2

)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SURROUN

SURROUND

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(

B PR

PRPB

AV 1

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2 /

F.PRE SENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

AUDIO

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

External amplifier

Audio input

(analog stereo)

HDMI OUT

ARC

ONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5

AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

COAXIAL

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2

L R

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

B PR

PRPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO

PB PR

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT jacks

(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

Video input

(component video or

composite video)

En 106

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at

Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multichannel playback in

another room (Zone4).

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to

the unit with an HDMI cable (p.42).

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2 and Zone4.

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set

“HDMI OUT2 Assign”

(p.149)

in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.

• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output

from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).

• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.36).

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV

(HDC

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SURRO

SURROUND

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

B PR

AV 1

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI OUT

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone4

Main zone

HDMI input

(Example: using a TV)

HDMI input

(Example: using an AV amplifier)

Zone2 or Zone4

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is

performed.

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings

En 107

■ Operating the unit from another room

(remote connection)

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the

supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for

each device before using (p.160).

Remote connections between Yamaha products

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that

support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals

by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

HDMI

)

AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

/PRE OUT

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SPEAKERS

CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

L R

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETW

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

IN OUT

REMOTE

The unit (rear)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

External device

(such as a CD player)

Remote control

Infrared

signal

receiver

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Main zone

Infrared signal

transmitter

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Yamaha products

(up to six, including the unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

En 108

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Use the ZONE switch to select a zone.

Press RECEIVER z.

Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled

or disabled.

When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding

zone indicator lights up in the front display.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how

you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,

see “Multi-zone output” (p.181).

• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each

zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is

selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches

to “SERVER”.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.81)

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.86)

• Playing back iPod music (p.87)

•

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.90)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.94)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.98)

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.101)

• You can also use the web control (p.111) to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4.

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is

ongoing in the main zone.

• The Zone2/Zone3 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input

source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the

Zone2/Zone3 input with the web control (p.111) or AV CONTROLLER

(p.11).

• To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the

Zone2/Zone3 input or use the party mode (p.109).

Caution

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or

Zone4.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

R. DE

SOU

EIVE

V V

ZONE

RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

En 109

■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or

Zone4

The following functions are also available when the zone you want

to operate is enabled.

Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

Press SCENE.

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,

hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front

display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)

Setting the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30

min, off).

Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds

(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be

operated.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be

operated.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple

rooms (party mode)

The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same

music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party

mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.

Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as

background music for a house party.

Press PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the

front display.

• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode

Set” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu.

• Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main

zone.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

V-A

PHO

R. DE

USB

NET

SOU

EIVE

SLEEP

VOLUME

MUTE

SCENE

PARTY

En 110

You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as

shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut

numbers.

• You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations

(p.100).

• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual

contents cannot be registered.

Registering an item

Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.

Press MEMORY.

• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use

numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.

To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.

Recalling a registered item

Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.

Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number

(01 to 40).

You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a

shortcut.

• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.

– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not

connected to the unit.

– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not

connected to the network

– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of

service.

– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.

–A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS,

the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you

have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not

recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.

Registering favorite items (shortcut)

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

01:Empty

Memory Preset

Shortcut number (flashes)

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSB RPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

02:Empty

Memory Preset

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

01:USB

Recall Preset

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENHAN

UNIN

PRE

BAN

RETURN

ENTER

REEN

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEEP

MUS

PARTY

DMI

MAIN

UDIO

AUX

PHO

R. DE

SOU

RECEIVER

INPUT

MUT

MEMORY

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

Numeric keys

En 111

You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.

• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these

cases, configure the security software appropriately.

• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby

mode, set “Network Standby” (p.113) to “On”.

• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.

– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x

– Safari 7.x

Start the web browser.

Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.

(Example)

• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.155) in the “Information” menu.

• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.113) to access the

web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of

the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.

• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.146), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC

to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,

refer to its instruction manual.

• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.

– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the

screen.

• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.11).

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)

Web browser

Web control

Router The unit

Web control

(wired or wireless) (wired or wireless)

En 112

■ Top menu screen

1 CONTROL

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

2 STATUS

Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.

3 SETTINGS

Moves to the settings screen.

4 PA RT Y M ODE

Turns on/off the party mode (p.109).

5 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

6 MAIN VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the

increments used for volume adjustment.

7 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

■ Control screen

1 PLAY INFO

Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

2 TOP MENU

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 SCENE

Selects a scene for the selected zone.

4 POWER

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

5 VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the

increments used for volume adjustment.

6 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment on the web control may not work on the unit depending on the unit’s settings.

En 113

■ Settings screen

1 Rename

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.146) or the name of each zone

(p.147). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Network

Selects the network connection method (p.144) or configures the network parameters (such as

IP address) (p.145). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

AirPlay Password

Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.101). Click “APPLY” to apply the

changes to the unit.

MAC Filter

Sets the MAC address filter (p.146) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click

“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload

Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control

screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby

Enables/disables the network standby function (p.145).

Backup/Recovery

Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.

Firmware Update

Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link

Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Tips

Displays tips for use of the web control.

Licenses

Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.

2 BACK

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

Note

• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.

• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network

devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and

other external devices.

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the

settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific

information (such as MAC address and IP address).

• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.

En 114

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio

decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

Viewing the status information on the TV

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Viewing the current status

Input source group Item

AV 1–7

V-AUX

AUDIO 1–3

PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

TUNER

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

* (U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is

tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (

p.83

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

Audio Decoder

Info

Item name

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

†‡PLƒx MOVIE

AV1

Information

Bluetooth

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

* During simple playback of iPod:

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

Input source group Item

Input source/

Party mode

status

Audio format/

Decoder

Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound

mode

Volume/

YPAO

Volume

status

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

INFO

DISPLAY

En 115

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

• Default settings are underlined.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

VOLUME

SBLRPL SBRSB RPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CL R

FPR

Tone Control

Option

{}

Item Function Page

Tone Control

(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and

low-frequency range of sounds.

116

YPAO Volume

(YPAO Volume)

YPAO Volume

(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 116

Adaptive DRC

(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from

maximum to minimum) is automatically

adjusted when the volume is adjusted.

116

Dialogue

(Dialog)

Dialogue Level

(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 117

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue

sounds.

117

Subwoofer/Bass

(Subwoofer/Bass)

Subwoofer Trim

(SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 117

Extra Bass

(Extra Bass)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. 117

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music

Enhancer.

118

Hi-Res Mode

(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for

enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital

audio).

118

Video Processing

(Video Process.)

Video Mode

(V.M)

Enables/disables the video signal processing

settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

118

Video Adjustment

(Video Adjust)

Selects a video adjustment setting from

presets.

118

Input Settings

(Input Settings)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input

sources.

119

Audio Select

(A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more

than one audio connection is made for one

input source.

119

Video Out

(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio

input source.

119

En 116

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass

(Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

• You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and

low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that

you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.

Settings

• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already

saved (p.51).

• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower

volumes or at night.

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically

adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for

listening to playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide

at a high volume.

FM Mode

(FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM

radio reception.

119

Traffic Program

(TrafficProgram)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Automatically searches for a traffic information

station.

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod

(p.89), USB storage device (p.93), or media

server (p.97).

—

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod

(p.89), USB storage device (p.93), or media

server (p.97).

—

Item Function Page

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)

Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is

enabled.

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

En 117

■ Dialogue (Dialog)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard

clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Setting range

to 3

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is

coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing

this setting.

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front

presence speakers are used.

– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.76) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range

to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)

Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0

dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy

enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the

presence or absence of the subwoofer.

Settings

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Ideal position

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.

On (On) Enables Extra Bass.

En 118

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.80).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• Compressed Music Enhancer works on the main zone, Zone2 and Zone3.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.80).

Settings

Default

TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this

function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio

(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.

Settings

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Configures the video signal processing settings.

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video

adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.141) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in

“Adjustment” (p.142) in the “Setup” menu.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

1 to 6

Enhancer (Enhancer)

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)

On (On)

Enables the high-resolution mode.

(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio

signal processing condition.)

Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.

Video Mode (V.M)

Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)

En 119

■ Input Settings (Input Settings)

Configures the input settings.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0

dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made

for one input source.

Settings

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Settings

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

Input Trim (In.Trim)

Audio Select (A.Sel)

Auto (Auto)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.

1. HDMI input

2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals

are input through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are

produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL

jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when

no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.

Video Out (V.Out)

Off (Off) Does not output video.

AV 1–7 (AV1–7),

V-AUX (V-AUX)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

En 120

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

En 121

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, USB

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Item Function Page

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 121

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 122

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via

AirPlay.

122

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media

Controller (DMC) to control playback.

122

En 122

■ Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder

Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

Settings

■ Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Input sources

AirPlay

Settings

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

SERVER

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range

(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

En 123

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.73) using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and

press the cursor key (q).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

■ Save

Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the

selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.74).

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

Item Function Page

Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 123

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can

also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items

to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

124

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 125

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 125

En 124

■ Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected

to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)

Settings

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set

“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.182).

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the

settings currently assigned to the selected scene.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item

and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio

with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)

and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Choices

Default

Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected

Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

Device Control

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if

an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is

connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports

HDMI Control.

Detail

Input Input (p.72), Audio Select (p.119)

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.72)

Mode

DSP Program (p.75), Pure Direct Mode (p.139), Enhancer (p.80),

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.118)

Sound

Tone Control (p.116), YPAO Volume (p.116), Adaptive DRC (p.116),

Extra Bass (p.117)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.140), Dialogue Lift (p.117), Dialogue Level

(p.117), Subwoofer Trim (p.117)

Video Video Mode (p.141), Video Adjustment (p.118)

Volume Master Volume (p.72)

Lipsync Lipsync (p.138), Delay (p.139)

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.133), PEQ Select (p.137)

Check or uncheck

En 125

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.73) for the selected scene.

En 126

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring sound programs/surround

decoders (DSP Program menu)

En 127

DSP Program menu items

• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround

decoder.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Settings for sound programs

Item Function Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be

used in combination with the

selected sound program.

bSurround*,

bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie),

bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*),

bPLIIx Game* (bPLII Game*),

Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*

(* Available only when

“SURROUND DECODER” is

selected)

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.

-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB

Higher to enhance the sound field

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the

direct sound and presence sound

field generation.

1 ms to 99 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the

direct sound and surround sound

field generation.

1ms to 49ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the

direct sound and surround back

sound field generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of

the presence sound field.

0.1 to 2.0

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of

the surround sound field.

Surround Back Room

Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of

the surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence

sound field.

0 to 10

Higher to enhance the reflectivity,

and lower to reduce it.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround

sound field.

Surround Back

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround

back sound field.

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s

Higher to enrich the reverberant

sound and lower to have clear

sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the

direct sound and reverberant

sound generation.

0 ms to 250 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the

reverberant sound.

0% to 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound, and lower to

weaken it.

Item Function Settings

En 128

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo”.

• Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND

DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.

Sound program

Item Function Settings

2ch Stereo Direct

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the

DSP circuit when an

analog audio source is

played back.

Auto

, Off

9ch Stereo

Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0

to +5

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear

volume balance.

-5 to 0

to +5

Higher to enhance the front

side, and lower to enhance

the rear side.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the left and right

volume balance.

-5 to 0

to +5

Higher to enhance the right

side, and lower to enhance

the left side.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume

balance using the

presence speakers.

0 to 5

to 10

Higher to enhance the

upside, and lower to

enhance the downside. (The

presence speakers do not

produce sounds when

“Height Balance” is set to

“0”.)

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables

monaural sound output.

Off

, On

Decode Type Item Function Settings

bSurround Center Spread

Selects whether to

spread the center

channel signals to left

and right when

2-channel source is

played.

Off

, On

Select “On” to spread center

channel signals to left and right if

you feel the center sound is too

strong when 2-channel source is

played.

bPLIIx Music

(bPLII Music)

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off

, On

Select “On” to wrap front left/right

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 to 3

to 7

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it

(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 to 0

to +3

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to strengthen

the surround sound field.

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 to 0.3

to 1.0

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

En 129

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En 130

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 51

Manual Setup

Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 133

Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 133

Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 133

Configuration

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 134

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 134

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 134

Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 135

Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 135

Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size. 135

Subwoofer 1

Subwoofer 2

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. 135

Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and subwoofers. 136

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 137

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 137

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 137

Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 138

En 131

Sound

Lipsync

Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 138

Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 138

Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 139

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 139

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 139

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 139

Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 139

Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 139

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 140

Virtual Presence Speaker

(RX-A3050 only)

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 140

Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 140

Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. 140

Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). 141

HDMI

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 143

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 143

Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 144

Network

Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 144

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 145

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 145

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 146

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 146

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Enables/disables the

Bluetooth

functions. 147

Audio Receive Disconnect Terminates the

Bluetooth

connection between the

Bluetooth

device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 86

Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from

Bluetooth

devices (

Bluetooth

standby). 147

Menu Item Function Page

En 132

Multi Zone

Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 147

Zone2 Set

Zone3 Set

Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 148

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 148

Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 148

Audio Delay Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3. 148

Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 148

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 148

Zone4 Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 149

Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 149

HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 149

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone. 149

Function

Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 150

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 150

Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 150

Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 151

Trigger Output1

Trigger Output2

Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 151

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 151

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 152

ECO

Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 152

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 153

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 153

Menu Item Function Page

En 133

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in

the selected pattern.

• Measurement results (Auto Setup)

• Power Amp Assign

• Configuration

• Distance

• Level

• Parametric EQ

Settings

Pattern1

, Pattern2

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,

you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

■ Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Choices

■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to

2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power

amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.

Settings

Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

Basic

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to

9-channel plus rear presence speakers) (p.20).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and

Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers (p.34).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default:

Zone2).

9ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers in the main zone and

Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.34).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default:

Zone3).

7ch +2ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone, plus

Zone2 and Zone3 speakers (p.35).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default:

Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).

9ch +RP

(RX-A3050 only)

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus rear presence

channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.31).

9ch +FRONT

(RX-A3050 only)

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus front channel

expansion using an external amplifier (p.32).

7ch +FP+RP

(RX-A3050 only)

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers, plus front presence and

rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.32).

En 134

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers plus front channel

expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone and Zone3 (or

Zone2) speakers (p.33).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default:

Zone3).

5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

Select this when you use 5-channel speakers plus front channel

expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone, plus Zone2

and Zone3 speakers (p.33).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default:

Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).

7ch BI-AMP

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front

speakers) (p.30).

7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front

speakers) in the main zone and Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.30).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default:

Zone3).

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP

(RX-A3050 only)

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front

speakers), plus front presence and rear presence channel expansion

using an external amplifier (p.31).

Front

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Center

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Surround

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

En 135

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to

“Front”.

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

Settings

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected and their size.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or

SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.

Settings

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

Surround Back

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Small x2

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

Front Presence

Large Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

Rear Presence

Large Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.

Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2

Use

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER

1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will

produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency

components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER

1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will

produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency

components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the

SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will

produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency

components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and

“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

En 136

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers, front/rear presence speakers and

subwoofers.

Surround

Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.

Front Presence

Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This

setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.

• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.24).

Rear Presence

Selects a rear presence layout when rear presence speakers are used. This

setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround/Front Presence/Rear Presence)” is set to

“None”.

• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.24).

Subwoofer

Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.

Layout

Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side

of the room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side

of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.78) works in this case.

Front Height

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the

front side wall.

Overhead

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the

ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front

presence speakers.

Rear Height

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed on the

rear side wall.

Overhead

Select this option when rear presence speakers are installed to the

ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the rear

presence speakers.

Left + Right

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right

sides of the room.

Front + Rear

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear

sides of the room.

Monaural x2

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.

En 137

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,

Subwoofer 2

Setting range

0.30 m to 3.00 m

to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,

Subwoofer 2

Setting range

-10.0 dB to 0.0 dB

to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

■ Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.51). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.51) to the “Manual” fields for

fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands

(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the

front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

En 138

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER

repeatedly to select an item.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and

the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3

Settings

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

Off

Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

Delay Enable

Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto/Manual Select

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

“Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

En 139

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on

the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual

Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when

“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range

ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic

adjustment and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5

■ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

■ Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.80).

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

Settings

Adjustment

Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB,

0.5 dB increments).

(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

Auto

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the

selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the

on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the

wall paper is displayed.

Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO

measurement results and the volume level.

En 140

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD

(RX-A3050) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2050)

(p.76). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD

/CINEMA DSP 3D functions with

the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo).

Settings

■ Virtual Presence Speaker

(RX-A3050 only)

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and

surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front

presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence

speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.76).

Settings

• Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set

“Virtual Presence Speaker” to “Off”.

■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround

speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back

speakers are connected.

Settings

• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.

■ Object Decode Mode

Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos

contents.

Settings

• Regardless of this setting, object-based audio signals are played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio if any of

CINEMA DSP programs is selected.

Off

Disables CINEMA DSP HD

/CINEMA DSP 3D.

Enables CINEMA DSP HD

/CINEMA DSP 3D.

Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

On Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Disable

Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be

played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.

Enable

Enables playback of object-based audio signals.

En 141

Video

Configures the video output settings.

■ Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video

adjustments).

Settings

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.158) in

the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be

displayed on your TV normally.)

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,

1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.

Direct Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.

Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.

Resolution

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,

1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Aspect

Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side

of the screen.

En 142

Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You

can register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6).

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Detail Enhancement

Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.

Setting range

to 50

Edge Enhancement

Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.

Setting range

to 50

Brightness

Adjusts the video brightness.

Setting range

-100 to 0

to +100

Contrast

Adjusts the video contrast.

Setting range

-100 to 0

to +100

Saturation

Adjusts the video saturation.

Setting range

-100 to 0

to +100

Adjustment

En 143

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

■ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.182).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.182) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio

when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AUDIO 1–3

Default

AUDIO 1

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for

connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

Enables/disables ARC (p.183) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers

connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the

unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the

unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

■ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) is set to “Main”.

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected

to the unit.

Settings

Off Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.

TV Audio Input

ARC

Off Disables ARC.

Enables ARC.

Standby Sync

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Amp

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

En 144

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or

HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Settings

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

■ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input

selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in

standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

Settings

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Off Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off

(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)

Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is

set to the power saving mode.

Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a

commercially-available network cable (p.47).

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via

the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see

“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.64).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit

directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the

unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.70).

En 145

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys

(q/w) to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

DHCP

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Off Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Enables the network standby function.

(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power

saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

En 146

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

• AirPlay (p.101) and DMC (p.122) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be

permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address

6–10” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys

(q/w) to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Filter

Off Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to

the unit.

MAC Address 1–10

En 147

Bluetooth

Configures the

Bluetooth

settings.

■ Bluetooth

Enables/disables the

Bluetooth

function (p.86).

Settings

■ Bluetooth Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from

Bluetooth

devices (

Bluetooth

standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns

on when a connect operation is performed on the

Bluetooth

device.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.145) is set to “Off”.

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Off Disables the

Bluetooth

function.

Enables the

Bluetooth

function.

Off Disables the

Bluetooth

standby function.

Enables the

Bluetooth

standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Zone Rename

En 148

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set

Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable

the volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.

Settings

• This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.133).

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Adjusts the audio output timing for Zone2 or Zone3 so that the audio is

synchronized with the video.

Setting range

0 ms

to 100 ms (1 ms increments)

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Settings

Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV

screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main

Zone Set” (p.147).

Volume

Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Variable

Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Max Volume

Initial Volume

Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby

mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

Audio Delay

Mono

Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

Zone Rename

En 149

■ Zone4 Set

Configures the Zone4 settings.

Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main

Zone Set” (p.147).

■ Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and

VIDEO) jacks are used.

Settings

Main

, Zone2, Zone3

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video

monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from

the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

with a component video cable.

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Settings

Main

, Zone2, Zone4

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.181).

Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2

Assign” is set to “Zone2”.

■ Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.109) for each zone.

Choice

Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4

Settings

Zone Rename

Audio Output

On Enables the audio output.

Off

Disables the audio output (video output only).

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

En 150

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input

source.

■ Procedure

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

■ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0

(higher to brighten)

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.153) is set to “On”.

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is

operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Settings

Dimmer (Front Display)

Short Message

On Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

En 151

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Settings

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone

or input switching.

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,

switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB

Settings

Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function

of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Settings

Wallpaper

Piano

Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Trigger Mode

Power

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in

the zone specified with “Target Zone”.

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

“Source”.

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with “Manual”.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

Target Zone

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

Zone3

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with power status of Zone3.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.

Zone4

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with power status of Zone4.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.

All

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of any zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.

En 152

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

■ Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if

no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into

standby mode.

Settings

Default

U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes

Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

Off Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Icon

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 Minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and

no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.

2 Hours, 4 Hours,

8 Hours, 12 Hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit

will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

En 153

■ ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.

• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

Off Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

English English

Japanese

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Italian

Chinese

Français

Deutsch

Español

Italiano

En 154

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Types of information

■ Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

■ HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

Viewing information about the unit

(Information menu)

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total

(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks (analog)

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

En 155

■ Network

Displays the network information on the unit.

(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

(When using Wireless Direct)

■ System

Displays the system information on the unit.

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating

the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.163).

■ Multi Zone

Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address (Ethernet)

MAC address

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

vTuner ID vTuner ID

Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.146)

Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection

SSID

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

The SSID of the wireless network

SSID The SSID of the wireless network

Security Security method

Security Key Security key

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address

Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication

Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.157)

TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.158)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.157)

Tuner Freq. Step

(Asia and General models only)

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.157)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Volume The volume for Zone2 or Zone3

En 156

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings take effect.

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

• Default settings are underlined.

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

Item Function Page

SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 157

REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 157

REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 157

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

157

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 158

MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 158

4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 158

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings

from the backup.

159

INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 159

FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 159

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 159

En 157

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Turning on/off the remote control sensor

(REMOTE SENSOR)

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor

is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.

Settings

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1

, ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE 1 together for 3 seconds.

To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE 2 together for 3 seconds.

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting

(TUNER FRQ STEP)

(Asia and General models only)

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or

region.

Settings

6  MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

 MIN

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

unit.

Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

8¬MIN

SPEAKER IMP.

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

REMOTE SENSER

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps

and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps

and AM by 9-kHz steps.

SBLRPL SBRSB RPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

ID1

REMOTE CON AMP

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

FM50/AM9

TUNER FRQ STEP

En 158

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC

Other models: PAL

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MONITOR CHECK)

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”

(p.141) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a

different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)

Select the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50Hz)

compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.

Settings

• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.

YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

NTSC

TV FORMAT

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

YES

MONITOR CHECK

MODE 1

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.

(4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack)

Depending on the connected devices or HDMI cables, videos may not

be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.

MODE 2

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

MODE 2

4K MODE

En 159

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.

■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO

to start the process.

Choices

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit

is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For

details, refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in

“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.163).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.155) in the “Information” menu.

• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when

backup has been created).

Note

• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored

correctly.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

BACKUP

RECOV./BACKUP

SBLRPL SBRSB RPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

USB

FIRM UPDATE

SBLRPL SBRSBRPR

SW1

SW2SW

FPL

CLR

FPR

x.xx

VERSION

En 160

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices

(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control

code of the external device.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other

ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the

registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register

the codes again.

• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all

the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI

Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This

function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

Registering the remote control code for a TV

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have

registered its remote control code.

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection

keys (p.161). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to

operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the

CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.

If that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press TV z.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

■ TV operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you

can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input

source selected on the unit.

Controlling external devices with the remote control

TV operation keys

INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH Switch the channels of the TV.

TV z Turns on/off the TV.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

EIVE

CODE SET

TV z

SOURCE

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

En 161

Registering the remote control codes for

playback devices

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if

you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use

the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are

controlled by the remote control, because their remote control

codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

Refer to “List of remote control codes” in the

CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your

playback device.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If

that does not work, try the other codes.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Press the input selection key.

For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for

the playback device connected to the AV 1 jack.

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote

control code.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE

blinks twice.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to

“Configuring scene assignments” (p.74).

■ Playback device operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your

playback device, you can control it using the following keys after

selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or

external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and

numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in

orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For

example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on

TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER

and the external device after pressing SOURCE.

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback

device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.

Menu operation

keys

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY Switches information on the display.

External device

operation keys

TOP MENU Displays the top menu.

POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected

song/video.

Searches forward/backward (by

holding down).

Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys Control the TV (p.160).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENHAN

REE

PTI

RAM

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

R. DE

CODE SET

DISPLAY

SOURCE z

SOURCE

RECEIVER

External device

operation keys

Input selection keys

External device

operation keys

Numeric keys

TV operation keys

Menu operation keys

En 162

Resetting remote control codes

You can reset a remote control code registered to each input

selection key.

Press CODE SET.

SOURCE blinks twice.

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Press the input selection key.

Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.

Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks

twice.

If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.

To reset the remote control to factory default settings

a Press CODE SET.

b Press RECEIVER.

c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

R. DE

CODE SET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

Input selection keys

Numeric keys

En 163

New firmware that provides additional features or product

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and

update it.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.159).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed

after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”

appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z

on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation

mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a

message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.155). You can update the

unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be

possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,

update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.159).

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

Information

icon

Message

System Icon

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE

234

MODE

SCENE

4321

AUDIO

567

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

SOURCE

RECEIVER

TV VOL TV CH

INPUT

MUTE

CODE SET

MEM

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

BLUET

MAIN

V-A

R. DE

NET

SOU

EIVE

V V

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 164

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to

optimize the speaker settings again (p.51). If you want to adjust the speaker settings

manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.133).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.139). You can also set the maximum volume for

Zone2 or Zone3 (p.148).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.139). You can also set the initial

volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.148).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching

between input sources…

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in

the “Option” menu (p.119).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.182). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.150) in the

“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.152).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p.157).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device

even when the unit is in standby mode...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output

videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in

standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.144) in the “Setup” menu

to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the

unit when this function is enabled.

Frequently asked questions

En 165

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby

indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.27).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”

menu to “Off” (p.152).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.157).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.27).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of

the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.153).

En 166

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in

orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.157).

External devices cannot be controlled using the

remote control.

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights

up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.160). Even if the remote control code is

registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

Problem Cause Remedy

En 167

Audio

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.154).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.139).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.154).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.138).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.51) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change

the speaker settings (p.134).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.51) or use “Livello” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.137).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu

(p.138).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.51) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”

menu to “Use” (p.135).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

En 168

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.143).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with

an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.39).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.143).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.143). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the

unit with HDMI).

The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is

disabled.

Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.149).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.154). If necessary,

change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.153).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

The sound is interrupted.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or

Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.106).

Problem Cause Remedy

En 169

Video

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.158).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video

Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.154). For information about video signals

supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.184).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both

the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.

The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the

VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the

playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.42).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with

an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.39).

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

The video is interrupted.

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)

Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you

are using (p.72).

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)

HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.106).

En 170

FM/AM radio

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.119).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.82).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.82).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations. Register AM radio stations

manually (p.82).

En 171

Bluetooth

Problem Cause Remedy

A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

The

Bluetooth

function of the unit is disabled. Enable the

Bluetooth

function (p.147).

Another

Bluetooth

device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current

Bluetooth

connection and then establish a new connection

(p.86).

The unit and the

Bluetooth

device are too far apart. Move the

Bluetooth

device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that

outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

The

Bluetooth

device does not support A2DP. Use a

Bluetooth

device that supports A2DP.

The connection information registered on the

Bluetooth

device is

not working for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the

Bluetooth

device, and then establish a

connection between the

Bluetooth

device and the unit again (p.86).

No sound is produced, or the sound is

interrupted during playback.

The volume of the

Bluetooth

device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the

Bluetooth

device.

The

Bluetooth

device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the

Bluetooth

device to the unit.

The

Bluetooth

connection has been terminated.

Establish a

Bluetooth

connection between the

Bluetooth

device and the unit again

(p.86).

The unit and the

Bluetooth

device are too far apart. Move the

Bluetooth

device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that

outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

En 172

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.145). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.145).

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a

wireless router (access point).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.

The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.

There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router

(access point).

Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are

no obstacles between them.

Wireless network is not found.

Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood

might disturb the wireless communication.

Turn off these devices.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the

wireless router (access point).

Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.94).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.146).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.94).

En 173

The files in the PC cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using

AirPlay.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the

router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the

unit (p.146).

Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.159).

Problem Cause Remedy

En 174

Error indications on the front display

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.94).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.87).

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.47).

Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.157).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the

remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.157).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for

some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.94). If

the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.

En 175

Audio information

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Atmos

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the

Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces

audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically

throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the

introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby Atmos Stream

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or

Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains

special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is

decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker

systems of every size and configuration.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Enabled Speaker

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology

employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the

listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that

can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall

speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby

surround playback.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby Surround

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1

content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional

speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or

products with Dolby speaker technology.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448

MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.

This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Glossary

En 176

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

En 177

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDCP

HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of

digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“

http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

Network information

SSID

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the

Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making

connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance

interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy

establishment of a wireless home network.

En 178

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

CINEMA DSP HD

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP HD

feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT

Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers

with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without

presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in

your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back

speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear

sound filed of CINEMA DSP.

En 179

■ Supported devices

❑ Bluetooth device

• The unit supports

Bluetooth

devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.

•A

Bluetooth

device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be

compatible, depending on the model.

❑ USB devices

• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable

audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB

chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.

• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of

the USB storage device.

❑ iPod

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,

depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

❑ AirPlay

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X

Mountain Lion or later, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

(as of May 2015)

■ File formats

❑ USB/PC (NAS)

* Linear PCM format only

• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of

FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Supported devices and file formats

Made for.

iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,

iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G

iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)

iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)

(as of May 2015)

File

Sampling

frequency (kHz)

Quantization

bitrate (bit)

Bitrate

The number

of channels

Gapless

playback

WAV *

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 — 2 ✔

MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —

WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —

MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —

FLAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 — 2 ✔

ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔

AIFF

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 — 2 ✔

DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 — 2 —

En 180

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

■ Video conversion table

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.141) in the “Setup” menu.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

HDMI HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

m: Available

HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out

VIDEO

out

Resolution

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p 4K

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p

480i/

576i

HDMI in

480i/576i mmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm

720p mmmm

1080i mmmm

1080p/

50, 60 Hz

mmmm

1080p/24 Hz

4K m

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm m

720p mmmm m

1080i mmmm m

1080p m

VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m

Video device The unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

COMPONENT

VIDEO out

VIDEO outVIDEO in

En 181

Multi-zone output

■ Audio output

m: Available

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)

*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”

*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input

source selected in the main zone is selected)

Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input

source selected in the main zone is selected)

*5 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the

main zone is selected)

*6 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input

*7 To play back DSD audio in Zone2/Zone3, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2/Zone3 input with the web

control (p.111) or use the party mode (p.109).

■ Video output

m: Available

*8 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”

*9 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.149) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”

Using the unit’s

internal amplifier (

p.36

)

Using an external amplifier (p.105)

Out

EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks ZONE OUT jacks

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2)

Digital audio (HDMI) m (*3) m (*3) m (*4) m (*5)

Digital audio

(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

m (*6) m (*6) m (*6) m (*6) m (*6)

Analog audio

(AUDIO)

mmmmm

USB

(including iPod) (*7)

mmmmm

Network sources (*7) mmmmm

TUNER mmmmm

Out

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks

(*8)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*9)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2 Zone4

HDMI video mm

Component video m

Composite video m

On-screen display

(browse/playback)

En 182

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.39) and “Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.42).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.73)

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering

remote control codes (p.161)

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

b Press ON SCREEN.

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

The unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

RETURN

PTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

En 183

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video

signal to the TV.

Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.

Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched

to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:

– “ARC” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack

marked “ARC”) on the TV.

Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to

the instruction manual for the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio

cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.39).

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.143) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.74), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).

En 184

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

En 185

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

Reference diagram (rear panel)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2/

F. PRESENCE

ZONE 3/

R. PRESENCE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

L R

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F. PRESENCE/BI-AMP

EXTRA SP1

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

(FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

WIRELESS

(HDCP2.2)

(RX-A3050 U.S.A. model)

En 186

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby

Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under

license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &

DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and

Rights Reserved.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic

accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or

iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet

Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its

compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may

affect wireless performance.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are

trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha

Corporation is under license.

Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)

This receiver supports network connections.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the

United States and other countries.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered

Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Windows™

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player

are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android™ Google Play™

Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi

Alliance.

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi

Alliance.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Google Noto Fonts

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);

you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.

You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software

distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS,

WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either

express or implied.

See the License for the specific language governing permissions

and limitations under the License.

Trademarks

Explanations regarding GPL

This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some

sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and

redistribute this open-source code only. For information on

GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the

GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website

(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).

En 187

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

Audio x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX)

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)

Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)

Component x 3 (AV 1–3)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)

•Others

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

- Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R

, EXTRA SP 2 L/R

)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible

[ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

*2 Note: Assignment is possible

[ZONE2, ZONE3, R.PRESENCE]

- Subwoofer Out x 2

(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)

- Headphone x 1

[RX-A3050]

- Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R

, R.PRESENCE L/R

)

*3 Note: barter to ZONE2

*4 Note: barter to ZONE3

[RX-A2050]

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)

•Video

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- Composite x 1

- Component x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2

)

*5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)

Other jacks

• YPAO MIC x 1

• REMOTE IN x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 1

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

• RS-232C x 1

HDMI

• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC

(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

-Dolby Atmos

-Dolby TrueHD

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- DTS Express

-DTS

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)

• Link Function: CEC supported

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[U.K. and Europe models]

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A

Bluetooth

• Sink Function

Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)

• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device

•

Bluetooth

Version .................................................Ver. 2.1+EDR

• Supported Profile ................................................ A2DP, AVRCP

• Supported Codec .....................................................SBC, AAC

• Wireless Output

............................................. Bluetooth

Class 2

• Maximum Communication Distance .......................10 m (33 ft)

Specifications

En 188

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

• WiFi function

- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method

- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection

and USB connection

- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device

- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES),

Mixed Mode

- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz

- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

-Dolby Atmos

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- Dolby Surround

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

[RX-A3050]

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 165 W+165 W

Center...........................................................................165 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 165 W+165 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 165 W+165 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 165 W+165 W

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 150 W+150 W

Center...........................................................................150 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 150 W+150 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 150 W+150 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 150 W+150 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 165 W+165 W

Center...........................................................................165 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 165 W+165 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 165 W+165 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 165 W+165 W

[RX-A2050]

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 150 W+150 W

Center...........................................................................150 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 150 W+150 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 150 W+150 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 150 W+150 W

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 140 W+140 W

Center...........................................................................140 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 140 W+140 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 140 W+140 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 140 W+140 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 155 W+155 W

Center...........................................................................155 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 155 W+155 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 155 W+155 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 155 W+155 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

[RX-A3050]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 )

Front L/R..................................................................200 W/ch

Center .....................................................................200 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................200 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................200 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................200 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R..................................................................185 W/ch

Center .....................................................................185 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................185 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................185 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................185 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................230 W/ch

[RX-A2050]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 )

Front L/R..................................................................190 W/ch

Center .....................................................................190 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................190 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................190 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................190 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R..................................................................175 W/ch

Center .....................................................................175 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................175 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................175 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................175 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................220 W/ch

En 189

• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

[RX-A3050]

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 )

Front L/R ................................................................. 230 W/ch

Center ..................................................................... 230 W/ch

Surround L/R........................................................... 230 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ................................................. 230 W/ch

Front Presence L/R ................................................. 230 W/ch

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 )

Front L/R ................................................................. 230 W/ch

Center ..................................................................... 230 W/ch

Surround L/R........................................................... 230 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ................................................. 230 W/ch

Front Presence L/R ................................................. 230 W/ch

[RX-A2050]

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 )

Front L/R ................................................................. 220 W/ch

Center ..................................................................... 220 W/ch

Surround L/R........................................................... 220 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ................................................. 220 W/ch

Front Presence L/R ................................................. 220 W/ch

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 )

Front L/R ................................................................. 220 W/ch

Center ..................................................................... 220 W/ch

Surround L/R........................................................... 220 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ................................................. 220 W/ch

Front Presence L/R ................................................. 220 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[RX-A3050]

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) ............................... 175/220/295/410 W

[RX-A2050]

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 ) ............................... 165/210/285/405 W

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................3.5 mV/47 k

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ).......................200 mV/47 k

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more

• Output Level / Output Impedance

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) .........................................1.0 V/470 

Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) .............................1.0 V/470 

ZONE OUT .............................................................1.0 V/470 

• Headphone Impedance .......................................16  or more

• Frequency Response

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ................................+0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .........................................0±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

[RX-A3050]

PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V)......................... 0.04% or less

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 75 W/ 8 )

......................................................................... 0.04% or less

[RX-A2050]

PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V)......................... 0.04% or less

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W/ 8 )

......................................................................... 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

(Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out)

PHONO ..............................................................95 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. ...................................................110 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

(Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO ................................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. .......................................... 75 dB/60 dB or more

• Volume Control

Main Zone ................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

Zone2/Zone3............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

• Tone Control Characteristics

Main Zone

Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz

eble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Turnover ..........................................................3.5 kHz

Zone2/Zone3

Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Turnover ..........................................................3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)

..................................................................................12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.

Video Section

• Video Signal Type ....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM

• Video Signal Level

Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 

Component

Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 

Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 

• Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio.......................................... 60 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response

Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)

........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models].............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]

...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models]................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)

En 190

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ......................................................... 65 dB/64 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6%

• Antenna Input ................................................75  unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models]...... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models]......................................... 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model]............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model]................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model] ................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[Canada model].............................................................. 400 W

[Korea model]................................................................. 390 W

[Other models]................................................................ 490 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off

.........................................................................................0.1 W

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),

Network Standby Off ........................................................1.4 W

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,

Bluetooth Standby Off

Wired .............................................................................2.2 W

Wireless (Wi-Fi)..............................................................2.2 W

Wireless Direct ..............................................................2.3 W

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On

(Wired), Bluetooth Standby On ........................................2.0 W

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),

Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On

.........................................................................................3.1 W

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models] ...........................................1210 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

..................... 435 x 192 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-5/8”)

* Including legs and protrusions

• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna

upright)......... 435 x 247 x 474 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 18-5/8”)

•Weight

[RX-A3050]

[China, U.K. and Europe models] ..............19.6 kg (43.2 lbs)

[Other models] ...........................................18.1 kg (39.9 lbs)

[RX-A2050]....................................................17.0 kg (37.5 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

En 191

Symbols

Exclamation mark (!) 155, 163

Lock icon (o) 152

Numerics

2.1-channel system 24

2ch Stereo 78

4K Ultra HD 184

5.1-channel system 22

7.1-channel system 21

9.2+2-channel system 20

9.2-channel system 20

, 21

9ch Stereo 78

Adaptive DRC 116

ADVANCED SETUP 156

Advanced speaker configuration 28

AirPlay 101

AM radio 81

ARC (Audio Return Channel) 143

, 183

Audio Decoder (front display information) 114

Auto Power Standby 152

Auto Preset (FM radio) 85

Backup/recovery of the settings 159

Banana plug 27

Basic speaker configuration 20

Bluetooth 86

Bluetooth Standby 147

Bookmark 100

CINEMA DSP 8, 76

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 140

Compressed Music Enhancer 80

Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 51

Decoder Off (front display information) 114

Dialogue 117

, 154

Dimmer (Front Display) 150

DLNA 94

DMC (Digital Media Controller) 122

Dolby Atmos 20

, 50, 79, 140

DSP Program (front display information) 114

ECO 152

Error indication (front display) 174

External device control (remote control) 160

External power amplifier 37

Extra Bass 117

Firmware update 156, 159

FM radio 81

Frequency step setting 81

, 157

Front display information 114

HDCP 45, 168, 169

HDMI OUT2 Assign 149

HDMI output selection 72

HDMI signal compatibility 184

Headphones 78

Hi-Res Mode 118

Initial Volume 139, 148

Input jack assignment 150

Input Trim 119

Internet radio 98

iPod content playback 88

iPod content playback (AirPlay) 101

Lipsync 176

MAC Address Filter 146

Max Volume 139

, 148

Memory Guard 152

Menu language selection 49

Multiple room playback 103

Muting 72

, 109

NAS content playback 95

Network Connection 144

Network information 155

Network Name 146

Network Standby 145

Option menu 115

Parametric EQ 137

Party mode 109

Power Amp Assign 133

Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 83

Pure Direct 80

Radio Data System tuning 83

Remote control 17

Remote control ID 157

Rename 121

, 125, 146

Repeat 89

, 93, 97

Restoring the default settings 159

SCENE function 73

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format 158

Setup menu 129

Index

En 192

Short Message 150

Shortcut (Registering favorite items) 110

Shuffle 89

, 93, 97

Signal information 154

Sleep timer 17

, 109

Sound program 76

, 77

Speaker impedance 19

, 26, 157

Standby Through 144

Straight decode 79

Subwoofer Trim 117

Surround decoder 79

Test Tone 138

Tone Control 116

Trigger function 48

, 151

USB storage device content playback 91

Virtual CINEMA FRONT 23, 78

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 21

, 140

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 20

, 140

Wallpaper 151

Web control 111

Wireless (Wi-Fi) 64

, 144

Wireless Direct 70

, 144

WPS 66

, 177

YPAO

(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 51

YPAO Volume 116

Zone 103, 147

Yamaha RX-V3079 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V3079

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

Download PDF

rapport

in andere talen

English: Yamaha RX-V3079 Owner's manual
italiano: Yamaha RX-V3079 Manuale del proprietario
русский: Yamaha RX-V3079 Инструкция по применению
français: Yamaha RX-V3079 Le manuel du propriétaire
español: Yamaha RX-V3079 El manual del propietario
Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V3079 Bedienungsanleitung
dansk: Yamaha RX-V3079 Brugervejledning
suomi: Yamaha RX-V3079 Omistajan opas
svenska: Yamaha RX-V3079 Bruksanvisning
Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V3079 El kitabı

Yamaha RX-V3079 de handleiding

Yamaha RX-V3079 de handleiding

in andere talen

Gerelateerde artikelen

Andere documenten